LG | HB994PK | Owner's Manual | LG HB994PK دليل المالك

LG HB994PK دليل المالك
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪Blu-ray/DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫)‪HB994PK (HB994PK/SB94PK-L/S/D, W94-P‬‬
‫‪P/NO : MFL65220870‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:24 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 1‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻲء ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﻨﺒﺊ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺿﻼﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ( ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻛﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﻛﺄﻭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ؛‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠـﺘﺄﻛﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺧﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻢ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺜﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺴﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻼ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺎً ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﻣﺎﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:26 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪AACS‬‬
‫)‪ (Advanced Access Content System‬ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ BD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ )‪ CSS (Content Scramble System‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ‪analog signal‬‬
‫‪ output‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .AACS‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ AACS‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭ‪ +BD‬ﻛﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ BD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻔﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪.+BD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ ،AACS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ BD-ROM ، BD‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺟﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪ (BD-ROM/DVD‬ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪SIMPLINK‬؟‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ؛ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.SIMPLINK‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "SIMPLINK‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪CEC‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،SIMPLINK‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ ‪.LG‬‬
‫"ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻣﺨﺼﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ‬
‫‪،Macrovision‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺮﺧﺺ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Macrovision‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺺ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء )ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫)‪ (CD‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:26 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Java‬ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Java‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Sun Microsystems‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪.Dolby‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ‪ ,Dolby, Pro Logic‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ D‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪.Dolby‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ HDMI licensing LLC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ BD-LIVE‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ DVD‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ /.DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (WLAN‬ﻟـ ‪ 802.11n‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ 802.11n WLAN‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﺰﻧﺔ ﻟﻸﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ”‪ “x.v.Color‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "Blu-ray Disc‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "BONUSVIEW‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣُﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AVC‬ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪VC-1‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ )‪ (1‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AVC‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫)"‪ VC-1 ("AVC/VC-1 Video‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (2‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC/VC-1‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.AVC/VC-1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳُﻤﻨﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﺿﻤﻨﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،MPEG LA‬ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪http://‬‬
‫‪.www.mpegla.com‬‬
‫"‪ "AVCHD‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "‪ "AVCHD‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻧﺎﺳﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻭﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DLNA CERTIFIED‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪.(DLNA‬‬
‫‪ 802.11n‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ WIFI‬ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.2.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ 2.0‬ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ IEEE 802.11n‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻱ‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻮ ‪.2007‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:26 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪38-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ™BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪39-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ( ‪11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‪12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪42-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ ‪44-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪48-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YouTube‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪15-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪) OPTICAL IN‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ( ‪52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪16-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ‪53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪18-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪23-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪55-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ‪25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ ‪25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ‪59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪27-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪33-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:27 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 5‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺗﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺒﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ »‬
‫« ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ALL‬‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺮﻃﺒﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺄﺭﻗﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﺴﺨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣُﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﻓﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺑﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ DVD-Video, DVD±R/RW‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VR‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AVCHD‬‬
‫‪ DVD±R/RW‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪AVCHDt‬‬
‫‪ACD‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ‪Audio CD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣُﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪/USB‬ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪MOVIE-N‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫‪MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣُﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪/USB‬ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪MUSIC-N‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪DLNA‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣُﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺵ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:27 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻠﻮ‪-‬ﺭﺍﻱ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD-R/RE‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ) DVD-VIDEO‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-R‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ ﻳﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬‫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪AVCHD‬‬‫ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪VR‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪AVCHD‬‬‫ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪) DVD+R‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ ﻳﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬‫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪AVCHD‬‬‫ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD+RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪AVCHD‬‬‫ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ‪) CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (DVD±R/RW‬ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ )ﺳﻮﺍ ًء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ( ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻄﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ) ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪( DVD±R/RW‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD±R/RW‬ﻭ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺠﻠﺖ ﻗﺮﺻﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟـ ‪ DVDs‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ CD-R‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (WMA‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3 / WMA‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Mastered‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪) .LG‬ﻣُﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪/‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻟـ ‪(windows Vista‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺳﻤﻌﻲ ‪) CD‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍءﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪) CD-R/CD-RW‬ﻗﺮﺹ ‪12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:27 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 7‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ‪ 25‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 50‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺫﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ – ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ HD‬ﺫﻱ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪- (1080 × 1920‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺄﻟﻮﻓﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻬﺠﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﺍﻱ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ MPEG-2‬ﻭ‪ (MPEG4 AVC (H.264‬ﻭ‪.SMPTE VC1‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.HD‬‬
‫‪1920 x 1080 HD‬‬
‫‪1280 x 720 HD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼﻥ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ )‪) (1080×1920‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ( ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .HD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻬﻮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،BD-ROM‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ‪.HDTV‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،DVD-Video‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،BD-ROM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،BD-ROM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﺎﺅﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪BD-J‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻳﺴﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ”‪“BD-J‬ﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪.BD-ROM Profile 2‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ BD-ROM) BD-Live‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ‪ (2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ BD-ROM) BONUSVIEW‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.1‬ﺑﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture-‬‬
‫‪.in-Picture‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:27 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻯ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ »ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ«‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪Advanced Video Codec High‬‬
‫‪(Definition‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .AVCHD‬ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٢٦٤.AVC/H ٤-MPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ”‪.“x.v.Color‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ”‪ “x.v.Color‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ”‪.“x.v.Color‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ”‪ “x.v.Color‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،AVCHD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ "x.v.Color‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Dolby TrueHD‬ﻭﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﺲ )‪ (DDP‬ﻭ‪ DTS-HD‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑـ ‪ 5.1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ HDCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ NTSC‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،PAL‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ NTSC‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:27 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 9‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ :POWER‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : (Z) OPEN/CLOSE‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ : INPUT (RADIO‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫)‪(FM, OPTICAL, HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪ :OPTICAL‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(-/+) TUNING‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ENTER‬‬
‫(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : (O) RETURN‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.BD-ROM‬‬
‫‪ :TITLE/POPUP‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟـ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DISPLAY‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :RESOLUTION‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :٩-٠‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CLEAR‬ﻳﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :D‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ MONO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ STEREO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.FM‬‬
‫‪ : :REPEAT‬ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪ : (. / >) SKIP‬ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : (m / M)SCAN‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : x‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : *PIP‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( )ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪.(BD-ROM‬‬
‫‪ : SUBTITLE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SEARCH‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.53‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ :X‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SPEAKER LEVEL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SOUND EFFECT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MUTE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) MUTE‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻭ‪ (D‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪.BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ ﻭ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﻭ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(-/+) VOL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) NIGHT‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ،DB-ROM‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ً‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) R03‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ (AAA‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :HOME‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DISC MENU‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ )‪ :(U / u / I / i‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AV/INPUT‬‬
‫‪ :(U / u) PRESET‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:27 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪ {/1 a‬ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪(F‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪(-/+) VOL e‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪./> f‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪500 mA‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪x g‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪B/X h‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Z (DISC IN/OUT) i‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻱ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺏ‪w‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺧﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:28 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪) FM ANTENNA‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪(FM‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪) HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺑﺼﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪AC IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:28 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ )‪.(A‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ B /‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ D /‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ E‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺬﻱ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺇﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳُﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﻳﺮﻳﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ a‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) -‬ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) +‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ~AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪) MUTE‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪" "REMATE‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ(‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ*‪.‬‬
‫‪ c‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪({/1‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻀﻲء ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻀﻲء ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫*ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺙ )ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 10‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪ + :‬ﺑـ ‪ +‬ﻭ‪ -‬ﺑـ ‪ .-‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎً ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ VCR‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪) HDMI OUT‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ (HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(30‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫َ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪) .HDMI‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ »ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ« ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.16-17‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ]‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(28‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،HDCP‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.5‬ﻡ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪.(1.3‬‬
‫ﻣُﺸﻐﻞ ‪BD‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 15‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،DVI‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ‬‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ 720x576p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1280x720p‬ﺃﻭ‪ 1920x1080i‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪.1920x1080p‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDCP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [Setup‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪RESOLUTION‬‬
‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪ [Home Menu‬ﻭ]‪.[Setup‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.17‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ RESOLUTION‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HOME‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺩﻗﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﻟﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﻟﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ،576i‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.576p‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪576i‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪1080p / 24Hz‬‬
‫‪1080p / 24Hz‬‬
‫‪1080p / 50Hz‬‬
‫‪1080p / 50Hz‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ‪ 1080p‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻔﻀﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ HOME‬ﺛﻢ ‪ RESOLUTION‬ﻣﺮﺍﺭﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ‪ My Media‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ )‪ CAT5‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪.(RJ45‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪LAN‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،LAN‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ LAN‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،DLNA‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣُﺸﻐﻞ ‪BD‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 18‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺷﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺳﻠﻜﻲ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ]ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ[ ﻭ]ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ [IP‬ﻭ]ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ[ ﻭ]ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪[DNS‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪CLEAR‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤُﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:29 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 19‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ ،IEEE 802.11n‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪.802.11b/g‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻱ‪-‬ﻓﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪IEEE 802.11n‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣُﺸﻐﻞ ‪BD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻻﺣﻆ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪WAN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ DSL/‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬‬
‫‪ DSL‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺑﺄﻃﻮﺍﻝ ‪ 50‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻻ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:30 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 20‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪U/u‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ WPA‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ WEP‬ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﻦ ‪ ،WEP‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ "ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ "1‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ]ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ[ ﻭ]ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ[ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DHCP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ [IP‬ﻭ]ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ[ ﻭ]ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ [DNS‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪U/u/I/i‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﻄﺄﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﺴﺢ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ]ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ[ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 7‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪] [Push Button‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ[ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 120‬ﺭﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪] [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[ – ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺒﺚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)‪ .(SSID‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺒﺚ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻓﻲ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:30 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 21‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ ،(ISP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎءﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 0.45‬ﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳُﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺫﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻣُﻬﻴﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺯﺩﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ LAN 10 Base-T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Base-TX 100‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.xDSL‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ‪ DSL‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ DSL‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻠﻲ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﻣﻮﺟﻪ" ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ®Bluetooth‬ﻭﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:30 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 22‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳُﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪:1‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﻐﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I/i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ . .1‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(22 – 18‬‬
‫‪ . .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫]‪ – [OK‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ – ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺇﺧﻔﺎء[ – ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪:2‬‬
‫ﻳُﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) Software Update‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪" “.No update is found‬ﻟﻢ ﻳُﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪] [Home Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:30 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 23‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ؟"‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪) .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪] [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺇﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ؟"‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪] [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤُﻨﺰﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺇﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ"‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.53‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:30 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 24‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SOUND EFFECT‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(30‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SPEAKER LEVEL‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (-/+) VOL‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Natural‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻣﺮﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Bypass‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Bass Booster‬ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[News‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳُﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Drama‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺳﻄﻰ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Sports‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) NIGHT‬ﻟﻴﻠﻲ( ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NIGHT OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[NIGHT ON‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Game‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Music ReTouch‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ :[Concert‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:31 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 25‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:USB‬‬
‫–‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪/USB‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪FAT32‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ NTFS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﺒﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪FAT32‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪/USB‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ FAT16‬ﺃﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.BD-Live‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪:[USB‬‬
‫‪Ii‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ :USB‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ USB1.1‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.USB2.0‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.43 - 39‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ َﻫﺐ ‪) USB‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ (USB‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[‪] ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ – USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻼﺷﺔ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪500 mA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ – USB‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣُﺸﻐﻞ ‪BD‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:31 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Home‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪:‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫‪Uu‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪UuIi‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪Uu‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪:‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪:‬‬
‫‪U u,‬‬
‫‪u ENTER‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪:‬‬
‫‪ HOME‬ﺃﻭ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[ – ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ – ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43-42‬‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ – ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬
‫]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ – ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 44‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(47‬‬
‫]‪ - [YouTube‬ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ YouTube‬ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ YouTube‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(50-48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ – ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(32-27‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:31 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 27‬‬
‫]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪1080p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،1080p‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [24Hz‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺲ ﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫)‪ (24p/1080‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑـ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.24/1080‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ]‪ [24Hz‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[50Hz‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 1080p‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [24Hz‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎً ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ ،24p/1080‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪TV‬‬
‫]ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ – [4:3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺍً ﻣﺴﺮﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ – [4:3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺍً ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻸ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻻﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [YCbCr‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫]‪ – [RGB‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪..DVI‬‬
‫]‪ – [Original 16:9‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪ .16:9‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ |‬
‫‪ 4:3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 4:3‬ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ – [16:9‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪.16:9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 4:3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ )ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ( ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Letter Box 4:3‬ﻭ]‪ [Pan Scan 4:3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ 720‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ »ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ« ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 17 - 16‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ – ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪ ،(EDID‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [1080p‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ‪1080‬ﺧﻄﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫]‪ – [1080i‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ‪1080‬ﺧﻄﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [720p‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ‪ 720‬ﺧﻄﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [576p‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ‪ 576‬ﺧﻄﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [576i‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ‪ 576‬ﺧﻄﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:31 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 28‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻟﻐﺔ[‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺕ[‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻭﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺃﺻﻠﻲ[ – ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺁﺧﺮﻯ[ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.54‬‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ( – ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [Speaker‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [Volume‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ "ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ" ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﻜﻞ" ﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [Distance‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ – [Test‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Yes‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I / i‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:31 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 29‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪HD AV‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ[ )ﺳﻴﻄﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﺑﺎء(‬
‫ﺃﺣﻴﺎًﻧﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ "ﻳﻨﺘﻈﺮ" ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ v V‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻭ‪300‬ﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻱ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ BD‬ﻭ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ – ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ – ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ[ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ :ENTER‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[– ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ[ – ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺣﺬﻑ[ – ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﻓﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،ENTER‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .CLEAR‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺯﺡ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "‪ ."210499‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 6:58:57 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 30‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪) .‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺷﺒﻜﺔ[‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ BD Live‬ﻭ‪.YouTube‬‬
‫]‪ 1-8‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ[ – ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ )‪ (٨‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺧﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ[ – ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Unlock‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻳﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪BD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .BD-ROM‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮﻱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪.BD-ROM‬‬
‫]‪ – [255‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ‪.BD-ROM‬‬
‫]‪ – [254-0‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪][BD rating‬ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪ [BD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.54‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ )‪ ،(LAN‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪) .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(. 22-18‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Connection Status‬‬
‫]ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ‪.BD-Live‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ[ – ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.BDLive‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ[ – ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ AACS‬ﺃﻭﻥ ﻻﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ DB-Live‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ[ – ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.BD-Live‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:31 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 31‬‬
‫]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺁﺧﺮﻯ[‬
‫‪DivX VOD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ®DIVX: DivX‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎءﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .DivX‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ DivX‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DivX‬ﺯﻭﺭﻭﺍ ‪ www.divx.com‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ‪ :DIVX‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ®DivX‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ .VOD) DivX‬ﻭﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ]‪ [DivX VOD‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪] [Setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪.DivX VOD‬‬
‫]‪ DivX‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ[ – ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ[ – ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.BD‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤّﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(24 - 23‬‬
‫]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ[ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺒﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ )ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭﻭ ﻛﻮﺩﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫]ﺧﺎﺯﻧﺔ ‪ BD‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ[ – ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ‪ BD‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﻭ ‪ i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺇﺧﻼء ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.58‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:32 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 32‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)‪OPEN/CLOSE (Z‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪:‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫)‪OPEN/CLOSE (Z‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،BD-ROM‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ x‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Xx‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ x‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ‪ x‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ = Xx‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ = x ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ BD‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪ ،BD-J‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ،BD-ROM‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ STOP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ > ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺬﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪][My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ > ﺃﻭ ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:32 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 33‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SCAN (m‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SCAN (m‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪][My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗُﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :A-B‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ALL‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ CD‬ﺳﻤﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ X‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE-N‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ PAUSE/STEP (X‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE-N‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ‪ M‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )‪ ٤‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MUSIC ACD AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫‪MUSIC-N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻭﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪ A-B‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) CLEAR‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ > ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻐﻰ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰء ﻣُﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪ACD AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ" ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [-A‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:32 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 34‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫‪MOVIE-N MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE-N‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Audio‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TITLE/POPUP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ) ‪ ٥٫١CH‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (٧٫١CH‬ﻭﻣﻌﻪ ]‪[MultiCH‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE-N MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SEARCH‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪I i‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ]ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )‪(A, B, C, D‬‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ .BD-J‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TITLE/POP-UP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:32 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 35‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺯﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﻤﻠﺖ ﻗﺮﺻﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻏﻠﻘﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪MOVIE-N MOVIE‬‬
‫‪MUSIC-N MUSIC ACD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [Movie‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻭ]‪] [Music‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[ ﻭ]‪] [Photo‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:32 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 36‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ[‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ )‪ (9-0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪Uu‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ii‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺖ[ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ "‪ "21020‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ]‪][My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ – ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ – ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ – ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ – ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ – ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ – ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣُﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫‪MOVIE AVCHD DVD‬‬
‫‪BD‬‬
‫‪MOVIE-N‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:32 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 37‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪™BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺰﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu ray‬ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ BD-Live‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﺮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺭﻓﻊ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪OPEN/CLOSE (Z‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪:™BD-LIVE‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﻀﺢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺧﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪OPEN/CLOSE (Z‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ BD-Live‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻘﺮﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪:USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ ™BD-LIVE‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪UuIi‬‬
‫‪i, ENTER‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺑﺎﻧﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪...‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻋﻤﺔ ﻟـ ‪ BD-Video (BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫‪/1.1‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻋﻢ ﻟـ ‪ BD-Video (BD-ROM‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ (2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،BD-Live‬ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BD-Video‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫– ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻚ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫)‪ (server‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪BD-Live‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 22-18‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ 31‬ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) USB‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.BD-Live‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BD-Live‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ [BD-LIVE‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ[‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(31‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ .BD-Live‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ AACS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،BD-Live‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻚ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ )‪(server‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 38‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .PIP‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،DivX‬ﺇﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ "(USB/DISC‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.40‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[‪:‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻓﻴﻠﻢ[‪:‬‬
‫‪Uu‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.37-33‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ CPRM‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ .DVD‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Disc Menu‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪CPRM‬؟‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ CPRM‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ( ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ" ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ CPRM‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪(Content Protection for Recordable Media‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 39‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ( ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(USB/DISC‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪) 1080 × 1920 :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪"avi"، ".divx"، ".mpg"، ".mpeg"، ".mp4"، ".mkv." :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪SubRip (.srt / .txt)، SAMI (.smi)، SubStation Alpha :‬‬
‫)‪ssa/.txt)، MicroDVD (.sub/.txt)، VobSub (.sub) SubViewer 1.0 (.sub)،.‬‬
‫‪ ،(SubViewer 2.0 (.sub/.txt)، TMPlayer (.txt‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪(txt.) DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪DIVX3.xx"، "DIVX4.xx"، "DIVX5.xx"، " XVID"،" :‬‬
‫‪) ""DIVX6.xx‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.،H.264/MPEG-4 AVC، DIVX-HD ،‬‬
‫‪MPEG1 SS، MPEG2 PS، MPEG2 TS‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪Dolby Digital"، "DTS"، "MP3"، "WMA"، " AAC"،" :‬‬
‫‪""AC3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 32‬ﻭ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(WMA‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 16‬ﻭ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻭ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ ،(WMA‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 32‬ﻭ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪:CD-R/RW، DVD±R/RW، BD-R/RE‬‬
‫‪ ISO 9660+JOLIET‬ﻭ ‪UDF‬ﻭ ‪UDF Bridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) 2000‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫• ﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ‪ 180‬ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ WMA‬ﻭ ‪AAC‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ USB 1.0/1.1‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ BD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ ،H.264/MPEG-4 AVC‬ﻋﺎﻟﻰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪.4.1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺄﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ GMC*1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Qpel*2‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،MPEG4‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﻭ ‪.XVID‬‬
‫*‪ – GMC 1‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫*‪ – Qpel 2‬ﺭﺑﻊ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 40‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3/‬‬
‫‪ .WMA‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،MP3/WMA‬ﺇﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪."(USB/DISC‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣُﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻼﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[‪:‬‬
‫‪UuIi‬‬
‫‪i, ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ[‪:‬‬
‫‪Uu‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ‬
‫)‪.(٩-٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ CD‬ﺳﻤﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u/I/i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U/u‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪(USB/DISC‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪“mp3”, “.wma.” :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ ،(WMA‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 11‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(WMA، MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﻭ ‪DVD±R/RW‬ﻭ‪:BD-R/RE‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ISO 9660+JOLIET‬ﻭ ‪UDF‬ﻭ ‪UDF Bridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) 2000‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،MP3/WMA‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ID3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.VBR‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺪﻳﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.36-33‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.43‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪:‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪:‬‬
‫‪UuIi‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫>‪./‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻬﺎ‪option is .‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[My Media‬‬
‫]ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ B‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) DISPLAY‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 42‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣُﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ .U u I i‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) RETURN‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ[ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ]‪] [Effect‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪] [Delay‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪] [Effects‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ[ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]‪] [Delay‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣُﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ B‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪I‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭء‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ‪ ،DLNA‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪][My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[My Media‬‬
‫]ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HOME‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪][My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ B‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺮﺽ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻠﻘﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(USB/DISC‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪“jpg”، “.jpeg”، “.png.” :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 24 × 3000 × 4000‬ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 32 × 3000 × 3000‬ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﻭ ‪DVD±R/RW‬ﻭ ‪:BD-R/RE‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ISO 9660+JOLIET‬ﻭ ‪UDF‬ﻭ ‪UDF Bridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) 2000‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 43‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ‬
‫‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ DLNA‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪22 - 18‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪,HOME, U u I i‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳُﺤﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪:‬‬
‫‪U u I i , ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻘﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪U u,‬‬
‫‪u ENTER‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪UuIi‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪SEARCH‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪DLNA‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣُﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣُﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ DLNA‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ DLNA‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (DLNA‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻴﻦ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ‪ DLNA‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،DLNA‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪.1.5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DLNA‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ‪DLNA‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺃﺑﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻴﻮﻧﺰ‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻠﻐﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬‬
‫‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ،Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫®‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‪Vista®،‬‬
‫)ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫• ‪XP‬‬
‫‪) Windows‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ(‪) Windows® XP Media Centre Edition 2005 ،‬ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫‪Windows Server® 2003‬‬
‫• ®‪ Windows Vista‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪64-‬ﺑﺖ )ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪32-‬ﺑﺖ(‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻟـ ‪Nero‬‬
‫‪ MediaHome‬ﻭﺣﺪﻩ‬
‫• ﻣُﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Intel® Pentium® III‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AMD Sempron™ 2200+ 1.2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ 256 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ‪× 800‬‬
‫‪ 600‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪16-‬ﺑﺖ‬
‫• ‪ Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫• ‪ DirectX® 9.0c‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ‪) 30‬ﺃﻏﺴﻄﺲ ‪ (2006‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺛﻴﺮ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪WLAN (IEEE 802.11b/g/n) ،‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 44‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟـ ‪Nero MediaHome 4‬‬
‫‪ Essentials‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳُﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﻣُﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻣُﻌﻘﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ،Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "‪ "Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]ﺷﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ‬
‫]‪] [Network name‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]‪ [Shares‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪] [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ]‪ [Local Folders‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪.[Shares‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ ]‪[I accept the License Conditions‬‬
‫]ﺃﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ[ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] [Typical‬ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ[ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪] [Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪] [Exit‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ[ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]‪] [Add‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ]‪] [Browse Folder‬ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ]‪] [Start Server‬ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ[ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫]‪] [Local Folders‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ[ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] [Rescan Folder‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‪] [More‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻭﺭﻭﺍ ‪ www.nero.com‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:33 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 45‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ BD‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ DLNA‬ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ DLNA‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .HOME‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ‪ ،(DLNA (Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 47‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ TITLE/POP-UP‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎءﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ً‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻼ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪...DVD‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.37 - 33‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ x‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:34 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 46‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪،(WMA‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(MP3‬‬
‫•ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ‪ 128‬ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪ AAC‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ ،H.264/MPEG-4 AVC‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪.4.1‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GMC*1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ .Qpel*2‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ،MPEG4‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﻭ ‪.XVID‬‬
‫*‪ – GMC 1‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫*‪ – Qpel 2‬ﺭﺑﻊ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫”‪،“jpg”، “.jpeg”،“.png” ،“.avi” ،“.divx” ، “.mpg.‬‬
‫”‪“mpeg”،“.mkv” ،“.mp4” ،“.mp3” ، “.wma”،“.pcm.‬‬
‫)‪(LPCM‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪) 2000‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪،(WMA‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 11‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ (MP3‬ﻭ‪ 44.1‬ﻭ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(LPCM‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪،(WMA، MP3‬‬
‫‪ 768‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ 1.536‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(LPCM‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 24 × 3000 × 4,000‬ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 32 × 3000 × 3000‬ﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪) 1080 × 1920 :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪) 1080 × 1920 :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)‪ssa/.txt)، MicroDVD (.sub/.txt)، SubViewer 1.0 (.sub)، SubViewer 2.0.‬‬
‫)‪ ،(sub/.txt)، TMPlayer (.txt.‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪(DVD (.txt‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.mkv/mp4‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫”‪“smi.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫”‪“sub.‬‬
‫”‪“srt.‬‬
‫”‪“txt.‬‬
‫”‪“ssa.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،“DIVX3.xx”، “DIVX4.xx”، “DIVX5.xx”، “XVID” :‬‬
‫”‪) “DIVX6.xx‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪DIVX-HD، MPEG1 SS، MPEG2 ،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪،“Dolby Digital”، “DTS”، “MP3”، “WMA”، “AAC”، “AC3” :‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪،“Dolby Digital”، “DTS”، “MP3”، “WMA”، “AAC”، “AC3” :‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪(MP3‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:34 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 47‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.22-18‬‬
‫‪,HOME, U u I i‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪:‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪:[YouTube‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪:YouTube‬‬
‫‪U u I i,‬‬
‫‪i ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ii‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺇﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪B, ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .YouTube‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺛﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪.YouTube‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ – ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ – ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ – ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ YouTube‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [Favorites‬ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( – ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﺮﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪ YouTube‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ" ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ – ﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪] [Local Site‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ[ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪.YouTube‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ YouTube‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺗﺒﺔ[ ]ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:34 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 48‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ YouTube‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .YouTube‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ‪ .DVD‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪./‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪HOME‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪HOME‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻭﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.YouTube‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ YouTube‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳُﻘﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:34 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 128‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪] [search‬ﺑﺤﺚ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ "‪ "D‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "D‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "Ď‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫]‪ :[OK‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ[‪ :‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﺍء[‪ :‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[#+-=& / ABC / abc‬ﻳُﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ[ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ YouTube‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫]‪ :[OK‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ[‪ :‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺭﺍء[‪ :‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[#+-=& / ABC / abc‬ﻳُﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ[‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪ YouTube‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ]ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ‪ YouTube‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪ YouTube‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ I i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ U u I i‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ :‬ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[X‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪.[X‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:34 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 50‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪:FM‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 50‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)‪RADIO (INPUT‬‬
‫‪+/- TUNING‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪PRESET u U‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ – ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ +/- TUNING‬ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) PRESET u U‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ERASE ALL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ENTER.‬ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MO./ST.‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:34 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 51‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪) OPTICAL IN‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻀﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺁﻟﺔ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ HDMI IN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪:[HDMI IN‬‬
‫)‪RADIO (INPUT‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪(-/+) VOL‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪:‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪(-/+) VOL‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ SIMPLINK‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI IN‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳُﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Dolby Digital Plus‬ﻭ ‪Dolby TrueHD‬ﻭ‬
‫‪DTS-HD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI IN‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ ،HDMI IN‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 576‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ 720‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080‬ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 1080‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ OPTICAL IN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪] OPTICAL‬ﺑﺼﺮﻱ[‪:‬‬
‫)‪RADIO (INPUT‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪(-/+) VOL‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪:‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪(-/+) VOL‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 52‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪/LG‬ﺟﻮﻟﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪/LG‬ﺟﻮﻟﺪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ u PR/CH‬ﺃﻭ ‪.U‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻼﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ http://lgservice.com‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪AV/INPUT‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫‪TV 1‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪AV/INPUT‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪PR/CH U/u‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪–/+ VOL‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﺻﻠﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 53‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﺤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪] :‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ[ ﻭ]ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ[ ﻭ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ[‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺎﻓﺃ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻘﻳﺮﻓﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﺒﻟﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺮﻬﻣﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻨﻴﻣﺭﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔّﻳﺰﻴﻣﺎّﺳﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻤﻳﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﺠﻴﺑﺭﺫﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺮﻴﻜﺸﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻜﺳﺎﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻐﻨﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻥﺎﺗﻮﺑ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻬﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﻮﺘﻳﺮﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻐﻠﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻣﺭﻮﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺳﻭﺭﻼﻴﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻨﻴﺼﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪6565‬‬
‫‪6570‬‬
‫‪8381‬‬
‫‪6577‬‬
‫‪6582‬‬
‫‪7289‬‬
‫‪6583‬‬
‫‪6588‬‬
‫‪6590‬‬
‫‪6665‬‬
‫‪6985‬‬
‫‪6678‬‬
‫‪6890‬‬
‫‪6672‬‬
‫‪6682‬‬
‫‪6671‬‬
‫‪7789‬‬
‫‪6669‬‬
‫‪9072‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺗﺍﻭﺮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻜﻴﺸﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻛﺭﺎﻤﻧﺍﺪﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻟﻮﻬﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺰﻴﻠﺠﻧﻹﺍ‬
‫ﻮﺘﻧﺍﺮﺒﺳﺇ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﻮﺘﺳﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺯﻭﺭﺎﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻲﺠﻴﻓ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻠﻨﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺴﻧﺮﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺰﻳﺮﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻥﺎﻴﺸﻴﻟﺎﻏ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺟﺭﻮﺠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﻤﻟﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﻧﻮﻴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺪﻧﻻ ﻦﻳﺮﺟ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺍﺭﺍﻮﻐﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺗﺍﺭﺎﺟﻮﺠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪7282‬‬
‫‪6783‬‬
‫‪6865‬‬
‫‪7876‬‬
‫‪6978‬‬
‫‪6979‬‬
‫‪6984‬‬
‫‪7079‬‬
‫‪7074‬‬
‫‪7073‬‬
‫‪7082‬‬
‫‪7089‬‬
‫‪7176‬‬
‫‪7565‬‬
‫‪6869‬‬
‫‪6976‬‬
‫‪7576‬‬
‫‪7178‬‬
‫‪7185‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﺳﻭﺎﻬﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺮﺒﻌﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻬﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺮﺠﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻠﺴﻳﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺴﻴﻧﻭﺪﻧﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﻭﺪﻟﺍ ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻟﺮﻳﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻄﻳﻹﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﺑﺎﻴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺎﻧﺎﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺮﻴﻤﺸﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﺘﺳﺎﺧﺍﺯﺎﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺰﻴﻏﺮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﻮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺩﺮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺳﻭﻼﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻨﻴﺗﻼﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻔﺗﻼﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪7265‬‬
‫‪7387‬‬
‫‪7273‬‬
‫‪7285‬‬
‫‪7383‬‬
‫‪7378‬‬
‫‪7365‬‬
‫‪7165‬‬
‫‪7384‬‬
‫‪7465‬‬
‫‪7578‬‬
‫‪7583‬‬
‫‪7575‬‬
‫‪7589‬‬
‫‪7579‬‬
‫‪7585‬‬
‫‪7679‬‬
‫‪7665‬‬
‫‪7686‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻻﺎﺠﻨﻴﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺍﻮﺘﻴﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﻭﺪﻘﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺱﺎﺟﻻﺎﻣ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺰﻴﻟﺎﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻡﻻﺎﻳﻻﺎﻣ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﻭﺎﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺛﺍﺭﺎﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻓﻭﺪﻟﺎﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﻮﻐﻧﺎﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺎﻧ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﺎﺒﻴﻨﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺠﻳﻭﺮﻨﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻳﺭﻭﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺑﺎﺠﻨﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻮﺘﺷﺎﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺳﺭﺎﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻟﻮﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻐﺗﺮﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪7678‬‬
‫‪7684‬‬
‫‪7775‬‬
‫‪7771‬‬
‫‪7783‬‬
‫‪7776‬‬
‫‪7773‬‬
‫‪7782‬‬
‫‪7779‬‬
‫‪7778‬‬
‫‪7865‬‬
‫‪7869‬‬
‫‪7879‬‬
‫‪7982‬‬
‫‪8065‬‬
‫‪8083‬‬
‫‪7065‬‬
‫‪8076‬‬
‫‪8084‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻮﺸﺘﻳﻮﻛ‬
‫ﻚﻴﻧﺎﻣﻭﺭ ﻮﺘﻳﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﻣﻭﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺳﻭﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻨﻳﻮﺴﻣﺎﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔّﻴﺘﻳﺮﻜﻨّﺴﻟﺍ ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻠﺘﻜﺳﻷﺍ ﺔﻴﻠﻴﺠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺑﺮﺼﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺑﺮﺼﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﺗﺍﻭﺮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻧﻮﺷ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻐﻨﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻛﺎﻓﻮﻠﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻨﻴﻓﻮﻠﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﺒﺳﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺍﺩﻮﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻠﻴﺣﺍﻮﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻳﻮﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺝﻮﻟﺎﺟﺎﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪8185‬‬
‫‪8277‬‬
‫‪8279‬‬
‫‪8285‬‬
‫‪8377‬‬
‫‪8365‬‬
‫‪7168‬‬
‫‪8382‬‬
‫‪8372‬‬
‫‪8378‬‬
‫‪8368‬‬
‫‪8373‬‬
‫‪8375‬‬
‫‪8376‬‬
‫‪6983‬‬
‫‪8385‬‬
‫‪8387‬‬
‫‪8386‬‬
‫‪8476‬‬
‫ﺔﻐﻠﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻜﻴﺟﺎﻄﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻠﻴﻣﺎﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺟﻮﻠﻴﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻧﻼﻳﺎﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺠﻧﻮﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻛﺮﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺎﻤﻛﺮﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﻮﺘﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻧﺍﺮﻛﻭﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺩﺭﻭﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻜﺑﺯﻭﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻣﺎﻨﺘﻴﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻜﻴﺑﻻﻮﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺰﻠﻳﻮﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻴﻓﻮﻟﻮﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯﻮﺴﻛﺇ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺸﻳﺪﻴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﺑﻭﺭﻮﻴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻮﻟﻭﺰﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪8471‬‬
‫‪8465‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪8472‬‬
‫‪8479‬‬
‫‪8482‬‬
‫‪8475‬‬
‫‪8487‬‬
‫‪8575‬‬
‫‪8582‬‬
‫‪8590‬‬
‫‪8673‬‬
‫‪8679‬‬
‫‪6789‬‬
‫‪8779‬‬
‫‪8872‬‬
‫‪7473‬‬
‫‪8979‬‬
‫‪9085‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻥﺎﺘﺴﻧﺎﻐﻓﺃ‬
‫ﻦﻴﺘﻨﺟﺭﻷﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻟﺍﺮﺘﺳﺃ‬
‫ﺎﺴﻤﻨﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻜﻴﺠﻠﺑ‬
‫ﻥﺎﺗﻮﺑ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻔﻴِﻟﻮﺑُ‬
‫ﻞﻳﺯﺍﺮﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻳﺩﻮﺒﻤﻛ‬
‫ﺍﺪﻨﻛ‬
‫ﻲﻠﻴﺷ‬
‫ﻦﻴﺼﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﺒﻣﻮﻟﻮﻛ‬
‫ﻮﻐﻧﻮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫‪AU‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫‪BE‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪BO‬‬
‫‪BR‬‬
‫‪KH‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪CL‬‬
‫‪CN‬‬
‫‪CO‬‬
‫‪CG‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻜﻳﺭﺎﺘﺳﻮﻛ‬
‫ﺎﻴﺗﺍﻭﺮﻛ‬
‫ﻚﻴﺸﺘﻟﺍ ﺔﻳﺭﻮﻬﻤﺟ‬
‫ﻙﺭﺎﻤﻧﺍﺪﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩﺍﻮﻛﻹﺍ‬
‫ﺮﺼﻣ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩﺎﻔﻠﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﺑﻮﻴﺛﺃ‬
‫ﻲﺠﻴﻓ‬
‫ﺍﺪﻨﻠﻨﻓ‬
‫ﺎﺴﻧﺮﻓ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻧﺎﻤﻟﺃ‬
‫ﻰﻤﻈﻌﻟﺍ ﺎﻴﻧﺎﻄﻳﺮﺑ‬
‫ﻥﺎﻧﻮﻴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪CR‬‬
‫‪HR‬‬
‫‪CZ‬‬
‫‪DK‬‬
‫‪EC‬‬
‫‪EG‬‬
‫‪SV‬‬
‫‪ET‬‬
‫‪FJ‬‬
‫‪FI‬‬
‫‪FR‬‬
‫‪DE‬‬
‫‪GB‬‬
‫‪GR‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺪﻧﻻ ﻦﻳﺮﺟ‬
‫ﺞﻧﻮﻛ ﺞﻧﻮﻫ‬
‫ﺮﺠﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺪﻨﻬﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﺴﻴﻧﻭﺪﻧﺇ‬
‫ﻞﻴﺋﺍﺮﺳﺇ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻟﺎﻄﻳﺇ‬
‫ﺎﻜﻳﺎﻣﺎﺟ‬
‫ﻥﺎﺑﺎﻴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻨﻴﻛ‬
‫ﺖﻳﻮﻜﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﺒﻴﻟ‬
‫ﺝﺭﻮﺒﻤﺴﻛﻮﻟ‬
‫ﺎﻳﺰﻴﻟﺎﻣ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪GL‬‬
‫‪HK‬‬
‫‪HU‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪ID‬‬
‫‪IL‬‬
‫‪IT‬‬
‫‪JM‬‬
‫‪JP‬‬
‫‪KE‬‬
‫‪KW‬‬
‫‪LY‬‬
‫‪LU‬‬
‫‪MY‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻒﻳﺪﻟﺎﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻚﻴﺴﻜﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻮﻛﺎﻧﻮﻣ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻟﻮﻐﻨﻣ‬
‫ﺏﺮﻐﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻝﺎﺒﻴﻧ‬
‫ﺍﺪﻨﻟﻮﻫ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺪﻨﻟﻮﻬﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﺘﻧﻷﺍ ﺭﺰﺟ‬
‫ﺍﺪﻧﻼﻳﺯﻮﻴﻧ‬
‫ﺎﻳﺮﻴﺠﻴﻧ‬
‫ﺞﻳﻭﺮﻨﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻥﺎﻤﻋ‬
‫ﻥﺎﺘﺴﻛﺎﺑ‬
‫ﺎﻤﻨﺑ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪MV‬‬
‫‪MX‬‬
‫‪MC‬‬
‫‪MN‬‬
‫‪MA‬‬
‫‪NP‬‬
‫‪NL‬‬
‫‪AN‬‬
‫‪NZ‬‬
‫‪NG‬‬
‫‪NO‬‬
‫‪OM‬‬
‫‪PK‬‬
‫‪PA‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻱﺍﻮﺟﺍﺭﺎﺑ‬
‫ﻦﻴﺒﻠﻔﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺪﻨﻟﻮﺑ‬
‫ﻝﺎﻐﺗﺮﺒﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻧﺎﻣﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺩﺎﺤﺗﻻﺍ ﺎﻴﺳﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺩﻮﻌﺴﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻌﻟﺍ ﺔﻜﻠﻤﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻝﺎﻐﻨﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺓﺭﻮﻓﺎﻐﻨﺳ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻛﺎﻓﻮﻠﺳ ﺔﻳﺭﻮﻬﻤﺟ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻨﻴﻓﻮﻠﺳ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻘﻳﺮﻓﺃ ﺏﻮﻨﺟ‬
‫ﺔﻴﺑﻮﻨﺠﻟﺍ ﺎﻳﺭﻮﻛ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻧﺎﺒﺳﺃ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪PY‬‬
‫‪PH‬‬
‫‪PL‬‬
‫‪PT‬‬
‫‪RO‬‬
‫‪RU‬‬
‫‪SA‬‬
‫‪SN‬‬
‫‪SG‬‬
‫‪SK‬‬
‫‪SI‬‬
‫‪ZA‬‬
‫‪KR‬‬
‫‪ES‬‬
‫ﺔﻘﻄﻨﻤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺎﻜﻧﻼﻳﺮﺳ‬
‫ﺪﻳﻮﺴﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺮﺴﻳﻮﺳ‬
‫ﻥﺍﻮﻳﺎﺗ‬
‫ﺪﻧﻼﻳﺎﺗ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻛﺮﺗ‬
‫ﺍﺪﻨﻏﻭﺃ‬
‫ﺎﻴﻧﺍﺮﻛﻭﺃ‬
‫ﺓﺪﺤﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻳﻻﻮﻟﺍ‬
‫ﻱﺍﻮﺟﻭﺭﻭﺃ‬
‫ﻥﺎﺘﺴﻜﺑﺯﻭﺃ‬
‫ﻡﺎﻨﺘﻴﻓ‬
‫ﻱﻮﺑﺎﺒﻤﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺰﻣﺮﻟﺍ‬
‫‪LK‬‬
‫‪SE‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫‪TW‬‬
‫‪TH‬‬
‫‪TR‬‬
‫‪UG‬‬
‫‪UA‬‬
‫‪US‬‬
‫‪UY‬‬
‫‪UZ‬‬
‫‪VN‬‬
‫‪ZW‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 54‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪) RESOLUTION‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪] [MUTE‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] [MUTE‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ً‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗُﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [NIGHT ON‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ NIGHT‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [NIGHT ON‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ NIGHT‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 55‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺫﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ FAT16‬ﺃﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪) USB‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.BD-Live‬‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 22 - 18‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(31‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ [BD-LIVE‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ[ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ [BD-LIVE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺘﻪ"‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪...YouTube‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫• ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ YouTube‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤٌﻌﺮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪] [My Media‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[My Media‬‬
‫]ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.47‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺫﺍﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ BD-Live‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 56‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ‬
‫‪4Ω‬‬
‫‪4Ω‬‬
‫‪3Ω‬‬
‫‪4Ω‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 41°‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 95°‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )‪ 5‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 35‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ % 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪% 90‬‬
‫‪) HDMI OUT‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫‪) HDMI IN‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‪:‬‬
‫)‪:DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﺳﻦ )‪ HDMI‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﺳﻦ )‪ HDMI‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻓﻮﻟﻂ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ( ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ × ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ‪:FM‬‬
‫‪ 108.00 – 87.50‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪Amplifier‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 185‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 185 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ Ω 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪(THD 1 % ،‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪+‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‪ 185 :‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 185 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪(THD 1 %‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ 185 :‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 185 +‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪ Ω 4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪(THD 1 % ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ 260 :‬ﻭﺍﺕ )‪ Ω 3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 30‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪،‬‬
‫‪(THD 1 %‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ 405‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﻴﺘﺮ ‪650 /‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪PAL/NTSC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 96 ,‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 192 ,‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻞ )ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٪٠٫٠٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪:LAN‬‬
‫‪ Ethernet‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ‪١٠٠BASE-TX/١٠BASE-T ,١ x‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪185 W‬‬
‫‪185 W‬‬
‫‪260 W‬‬
‫‪185 W‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬
‫‪370 W‬‬
‫‪370 W‬‬
‫‪520 W‬‬
‫‪370 W‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ×‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ( ‪290 x 1170 x 290 mm 180 x 436 x 392 mm 340 x 1285 x 340 mm 340 x 1285 x 340 mm‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 12.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪200 - 240 V ~ 50/60 Hz‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪75 W‬‬
‫‪ 11.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪40 W‬‬
‫‪ 7.6‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 5.1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪45 W‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪200 - 240 V ~ 50/60 Hz‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪50 W‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ( ‪ 252 × 213 × 64‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫‪ 5.8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺔﻋﺎﻤﺴﻟﺍ ﻞﺑﺎﻛ )‪ ،(2‬ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻭﻝ )‪ ،(1‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )‪ HDMI ،(2‬ﻞﺑﺎﻛﻭ )‪ ،(1‬ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪، (1) FM‬‬
‫‪ Optical‬ﻞﺑﺎﻛﻭ )‪ ،(1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪(1) Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 57‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺇﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ "ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ ".‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ LG‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ )‪ (1‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (2‬ﺃﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗُﺼﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗُﻀﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻪ ﻭﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﻌﺒﺮ ‪ LG‬ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺗﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻣﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗُﻘﺪﻡ ‪ LG‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗُﺴﻴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪.LG‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ "ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻫﻮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "LG‬ﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻡ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 58‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫• ‪Libpcap‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ GPL‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻣﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ‪ LGPL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫‪:GPL2.0/LGPL2.1‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ GPL‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪Linux kernel 2.6، bash، busybox، dhcpcd، mtd-utils، :‬‬
‫‪nettools، procps، sysutils، tinylogin‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ‪uClibc, DirectFB, iconv, cairo, gnutls, libcrypt, libgpg-err, :LGPL‬‬
‫‪libusb‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ gSOAP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪gsoap :1.3‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺁﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻃﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‪opensource@lge.com :‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ )‪ (3‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ LG‬ﻟﻺﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ ‪ LGPL‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html and‬‬
‫‪.http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ gSOAP‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪.http://www.cs.fsu.edu/~engelen/license.html‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ© ‪1991‬‬
‫– ‪ ،1998‬ﻃﻮﻣﺎﺱ ﺝ‪ .‬ﻟﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤُﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ﻟﺪﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻝ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﻠﺰ ‪2006- 1992‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2003 – 1998‬ﻟﺪﺍﻧﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻼﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1999 – 1998‬ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1990‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺭﻳﺠﻴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭﻑ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﻔﻴﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺃﻭﻑ ﻛﺎﻟﻴﻔﻮﺭﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2005 – 1998‬ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪.OpenSSL‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1992 – 1991‬ﻟﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺍﻧﻴﻨﺒﻴﺮﺝ ‪pk@cs.few.eur.nl‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1993‬ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻧﻜﻮ ﻻﻧﻜﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪branko@hacktic.nl‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1993‬ﻷﻟﺮﻳﺘﺶ ﺑﻴﺠﻠﻮ ‪pegelow@moorea.uni-muenster.de‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1996 – 1995‬ﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﺰﺍﺑﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﺎﺳﺘﻴﻦ ‪mec@duracef.shout.net‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 1996 – 1995 – 1994 – 1993‬ﻟﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﻼﺩﻛﻲ ‪jrs@world.std.com‬‬
‫• ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2000 – 1999‬ﻟﻮﻳﻜﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻛﻴﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪wakkerma@debian.org‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﻷﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺛﻴﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )"ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ"(‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻧﺸﺮ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻬﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ "ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ"‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻔﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻠﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﻋﺎءﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ‪ :Freetype‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2003‬ﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪FreeType‬‬
‫)‪.(www.freetype.org‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺒﺔ ‪ :libpng‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2004‬ﻟﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﺭﺯ‪-‬ﺑﻴﺮﺳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ :Zlib‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2002 – 1995‬ﻟﺠﻴﻦ‪-‬ﻟﻮﺏ ﺟﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﺃﺩﻟﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺇﻛﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2006‬ﻹﻛﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺘﻴﻨﺮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ‪:OpenSSL‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺭﻳﻚ ﻳﻮﻧﺞ )‪.(eay@cryptsoft.com‬‬
‫– ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﺩﺳﻮﻥ )‪.(tjh@cryptsoft.com‬‬
‫– ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣُﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻉ ‪ OpenSSL‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪.OpenSSL‬‬
‫)‪(http://www.openssl.org‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ‪ :libcurl‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ ،2008 – 1996‬ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻞ ﺳﺘﻴﻨﺒﻴﺮﺝ‪daniel@haxx.se ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ‪ :++boost C‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ﻟﺒﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻭﺯ ‪2003 - 1999‬‬
‫‪ :UPnP SDK‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2003 – 2000‬ﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺒﻨﺖ‪ :‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ © ‪ 2004 – 1998‬ﻟﻤﺎﻳﻚ ﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻴﻔﻤﺎﻥ ‪mike@infonexus.com‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫‪2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM‬‬
‫‪HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 59‬‬
HB994PK-D.AARELLK_ARAB_0870.indd 60
2010.8.16 5:47:35 PM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising